07／04／26 18：35：53 31SCV650 0002...

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Element was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０７／０４／２６　１８：３５：５３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００２　

2008 Element

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０７／０４／２６　１８：３５：５７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００３　

2008 Element

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

These signal words mean:

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：０７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００４　

2008 Element

Your Element has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higherground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, andrough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

156179Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００５　

2008 Element

2008 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii Important Handling Information .................................................................................................................... iv Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 4 Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 7 Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ............................................ 57 Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, and cruise control) ........................................................... 101 Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ..................................................................... 139 Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 155 Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 183 Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ............................. 221 Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 245 Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 261 Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 265 Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures) 1 00X31-SCV-6502

2

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：２３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００７　

2008 Element

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other convenience

features.A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Before Driving

Maintenance

Driving

Taking Care of the Unexpected

3

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：３９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００８　

2008 Element

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

A/T model is shown.

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONMANUAL TRANSMISSION

(P.92)(P.80)

(P.91)

PARKING BRAKE(P.93)

(P.102)

INSTRUMENT PANELGAUGES(P.66)

(P.59)

(P.142)

(P.161)(P.159)

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG(P.11, 27)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG(P.11, 34)

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：４４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００９　

2008 Element

＊

＊

＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1 :2 : If equipped

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

A/T model is shown.

AUDIO SYSTEM

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS(P.74)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HORN

DIGITAL CLOCK(P.107)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER(P.73)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P.73)

(P.70)(P.71)

(P.134)

(P.135)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.34)

(P.132)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET(P.98)

(P.135)

CRUISE CONTROLMASTER BUTTON

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST(VSA) SYSTEMON/OFF SWITCH(P.172)

2

1

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１０　

2008 Element

6

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：５３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１１　

2008 Element

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the

............................Seat Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 22...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 24

......Airbag System Components . 24How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 27...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 32

How the SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 33

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

.............................Airbag Service . 35...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 37

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 37

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 38

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 40

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 40

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41Protecting Infants and

.........................Small Children . 42.......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 43.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 44....................Installing a Child Seat . 45

...............................With LATCH . 46.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 48

..............................With a Tether . 50...........Protecting Larger Children . 51

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 51..................Using a Booster Seat . 52

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 52

...Additional Safety Precautions . 53.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...................................Safety Labels . 55

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

０７／０４／２６　１８：３６：５７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１２　

2008 Element

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).37 53

16

185

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

8

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：０７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１３　

2008 Element

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the seatbelts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(2)(6)

(4)(3)

(1)

(7)

(5)

(2)

(8)

(8)

(9)(11)

(10)(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：１３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１４　

2008 Element

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：２５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１５　

2008 Element

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).27 32

30

CONTINUED

Airbags

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：３２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１６　

2008 Element

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.


12

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：３８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１７　

2008 Element

－

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open monitor on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door or the tailgateor the hatch is not tightly closed.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand tailgate monitor system works.

5337

6380

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 2.1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：４９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１８　

2008 Element

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down (seepage ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

83

74


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３７：５６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００１９　

2008 Element

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

85

83


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２０　

2008 Element

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：１０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２１　

2008 Element

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

20


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：１８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２２　

2008 Element

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.



Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

18

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：２５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２３　

2008 Element

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the front airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２４　

2008 Element

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any objects, such as a folded-downback seat, that are touching therear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all four seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt, the beeper will sound and theindicator will flash again at regularintervals.

29 30

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：４０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２５　

2008 Element

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

16

48

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：４７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２６　

2008 Element

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

32

209

HondaWarranty Information

do not deploy

Seat Belt MaintenanceAutomatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：５５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２７　

2008 Element

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０７／０４／２６　１８：３８：５９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２８　

2008 Element

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

(1)(3)

(5)

(4)

(13)

(7)

(5)

(4)

(6)

(10)

(12)

(11)

(8) (2)(9)

(10)

(14)

(15)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator(13) Rollover Sensor(14) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(15) Rear Safing Sensor

０７／０４／２６　１８：３９：０５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００２９　

2008 Element

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

27

32

30

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

(16)

(17)(16) Side Curtain Airbags(17) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

０７／０４／２６　１８：３９：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３０　

2008 Element

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or rollover.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

22

31

2933

34

34

20

29


26

０７／０４／２７　１４：５９：０５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３１　

2008 Element

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).29

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

０７／０４／２６　１８：３９：２９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３２　

2008 Element

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

latched


28

０７／０４／２６　１８：３９：３７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３３　

2008 Element

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.


Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

PASSENGER’S SEATWEIGHT SENSOR

DRIVER’S SEATPOSITION SENSOR

０７／０４／２６　１８：３９：４７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３４　

2008 Element

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

If your vehicle has optional floormats, make sure the mat behind thefront passenger’s seat is hooked tothe floor mat anchor (see page ).If it is not, the mat may interferewith the proper operation of thesensors and operation of the seat.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

34

209


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

How Your Side Airbags Work

30

０７／０４／２６　１８：３９：５６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３５　

2008 Element

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

34


Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３６　

2008 Element

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover


32

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３７　

2008 Element

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.


How the SRS Indicator Works

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３８　

2008 Element

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and go off(see page ). If it doesn’t come on,stays on, or comes on while drivingwithout a passenger in the front seat,have the system checked.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected in the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

61


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not mean

34

CanadaU.S.

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：２８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００３９　

2008 Element

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any object, such as a folded-downback seat, that is touching the rearof the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during a crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：３６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４０　

2008 Element

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into the seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.


36

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：４２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４１　

2008 Element

－－

－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

42 5051 53

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：５０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４２　

2008 Element

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

34

51

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

０７／０４／２６　１８：４０：５９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４３　

2008 Element

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

０７／０４／２６　１８：４１：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４４　

2008 Element

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Your vehicle has two back seatswhere children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

17

83

51

16

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


40

０７／０４／２６　１８：４１：２０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４５　

2008 Element

－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Children who play in vehiclescan accidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even veryyoung children learn how tounlock vehicle doors, turn on theignition, and open the tailgate orhatch, which can lead to accidentalinjury or death.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

4948

Additional Safety Precautions

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Lock all doors, the tailgate and thehatch when your vehicle is not inuse.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters (on some models) outof the reach of children.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

０７／０４／２６　１８：４１：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４６　

2008 Element

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

０７／０４／２６　１８：４１：３６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４７　

2008 Element

A child who is at least 1 year old, andwho fits within the child seat maker’sweight and height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４１：４５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４８　

2008 Element

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two secondrow seats.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

34

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

44

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４１：５２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００４９　

2008 Element

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

45

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：０１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５０　

2008 Element

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.Remove both anchor covers by

pulling forward.Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the rear seats.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


46

MARKS

Rigid-typeLOWER ANCHORS ANCHOR COVER

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５１　

2008 Element

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Remove the head restraint (seepage ). Make sure the removedhead restraints are secured in thecargo area, and reinstalled whenthe child seat is removed.

Slide the anchor cover open.

Route the tether strap over the topof the seat-back, making sure thestrap is not twisted.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

5.

4.

6.

7.85

CONTINUED

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

TETHER ANCHOR

ANCHOR COVERFlexible-type

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５２　

2008 Element

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

1.

8.

9.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


48

TETHER ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５３　

2008 Element

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.2.

3.

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：３５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５４　

2008 Element

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After securing the child seat in thedesired position (see page ),remove the head restraint (seepage ), then route the tetherstrap over the top of the seat-back.

Slide the anchor cover open asshown.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in either back seat, usingone of the anchor points shownabove.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions. Makesure the removed head restraint issecured in the cargo area.Reinstall the head restraint inplace when you remove the childseat.

1.

2.

3.

4.

48

85

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


50

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR POINTS TETHER ANCHOR

ANCHOR COVER

TETHER ANCHOR

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：４３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５５　

2008 Element

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４２：５３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５６　

2008 Element

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards and that you followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Using a Booster Seat When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Protecting Larger Children

52

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：０１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５７　

2008 Element

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

51

Additional Safety Precautions

Maturity

Physical Size

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５８　

2008 Element

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

With the tailgate or hatch open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into yourvehicle’s interior and create ahazardous condition. If you mustdrive with the tailgate or hatch open,open all the windows and set theheating and cooling system as shownbelow.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

54

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００５９　

2008 Element

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

U.S. models only

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：３３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６０　

2008 Element

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian modelsU.S. models

Safety Labels

56

HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

DOORJAMBS

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：４７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６１　

2008 Element

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58

............................Instrument Panel . 59..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60

.............................................Gauges . 66...................................Trip Meter . 66

.....................................Odometer . 66..................................Fuel Gauge . 67

..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 67...................Temperature Gauge . 68..................Maintenance Minder . 68

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 69

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 70...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 71

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72.................Hazard Warning Button . 73.................Rear Window Defogger . 73

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 74...............................Keys and Locks . 75

........................Immobilizer System . 76.......................Remote Transmitter . 77

................................Ignition Switch . 79......................................Door Locks . 80

......................Power Door Locks . 80..................................Rear Doors . 81

............................................Hatch . 81........................................Tailgate . 82

.................................................Seats . 83........................Seat Adjustments . 83

Driver’s Seat Height..............................Adjustment . 84

...................Front Seat Armrests . 84..........................Head Restraints . 85

..........Reclining the Front Seats . 86...............Folding the Rear Seats . 87

..........Removing the Rear Seats . 89..............................Power Windows . 91

.............................................Mirrors . 92....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 92

.................................Rear Windows . 93

.................................Parking Brake . 93............................................Skylight . 93

.................................Interior Lights . 96................................Ceiling Light . 96

.....................................Spotlights . 96........................Cargo Area Light . 96

..................Ignition Switch Light . 96...........Interior Convenience Items . 97

.......................Beverage Holders . 98..........Accessory Power Sockets . 98

....................................Glove Box . 98......................................Sun Visor . 99

..............................Vanity Mirror . 99

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６２　

2008 Element

＊

＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

58

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.102)

PARKING BRAKE(P.93)

(P.80)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

(P.107)

INSTRUMENT PANELGAUGES

(P.59)(P.66)


VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST(VSA)SYSTEM ON/OFFSWITCH

A/T model is shown.

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

(P.91)

MIRROR CONTROLS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

(P.92)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

(P.134)

(P.172)

(P. 135)

(P.135)

(P.142)

０７／０４／２６　１８：４３：５７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６３　

2008 Element

＊ The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

(P.61)

(P.64)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST(VSA) SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.61)

(P.65)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR (P.61)

LIGHT ON INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR (P.60)

(P.62)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.62)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR (P.64)

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.60)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR(P.63)

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITOR (P.63)

TPMS INDICATOR

(P.60, 236)(P.60, 237)

(P.60, 235)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR (P.61)

０７／０４／２６　１８：４４：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６４　

2008 Element

The instrument panel has manyindicators that give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

See page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

This indicator has two functions:This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it remains on after you havefully released the parking brakewhile the engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

2.

1.236

235

235237

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator (Red)

Instrument Panel Indicators

60

U.S. Canada

０７／０４／２６　１８：４４：１５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６５　

2008 Element

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

20

185

33

34

168


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Maintenance MinderIndicatorSide Airbag Off

Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

CanadaU.S.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４４：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６６　

2008 Element

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink, and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blinkor they blink rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

76204

135

Canadian models only


Cruise Control Indicator

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

62

０７／０４／２６　１８：４４：３５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６７　

2008 Element

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

All of the indicators in the monitordisplay come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

72

72

197

Canadian models only


Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Door and Tailgate Open MonitorLow Fuel Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０７／０４／２７　１５：４６：４８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６８　

2008 Element

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour vehicle checked by your dealer.Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal driving ability, but will nothave VSA traction and stabilityenhancement. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

3.

171

171

171

222

243169


Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation IndicatorIndicator

64

０７／０４／２６　１８：４４：５７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００６９　

Low Tire Pressure(VSA) System Indicator

2008 Element

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS; thesystem that monitors tire pressure.With this indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：０２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７０　

2008 Element

This shows the number of miles (U.S.)or kilometers (Canada) driven sinceyou last reset it.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the lastselection is displayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.

Odometer

Trip Meter

Gauges

66

SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGETACHOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGEODOMETER/TRIP METER

SELECT/RESETKNOB

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：１０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７１　

2008 Element

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

236

Gauges

Fuel Gauge Check Fuel Cap Message

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：１７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７２　

2008 Element

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Turn topage for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine’scooling system.

233 185

Gauges

Maintenance MinderTemperature Gauge

68

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：２１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７３　

2008 Element

＊

＊

＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1 :2 : If equipped

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS SHIFT LEVER (A/T)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

A/T model is shown. CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.71)WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P.70)

(P.73)

(P.73)STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT(P.74)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

HORN

VSA OFF SWITCH


REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P.134)

(P.135)

(P.172)

(P.161)

(P.135)

1

2

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７４　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－－－

－

－

－

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.

OFF

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

Hold past ON to turn the windowwiper on and the window washeron.

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise and hold tospray the window washer andoperate the wiper.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

3.4.

Windshield Wiper

OFF

LO

HI

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

MIST

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

70

０７／０４／２７　１３：３７：４９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７５　

2008 Element

－－Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turn SignalOFFParking and interior lightsHeadlights onHigh BeamsFlash high beams

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

CONTINUED

Turn Signal Headlights

Turn Signals and HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：４６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７６　

2008 Element

－ Push the lever backuntil you hear a click to turn on thehigh beams. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page ).Pull the lever back again to lowbeams.

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

You can change the instrument panelbrightness only when the lightswitch is on.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

To adjust the brightness, turn theknob on the instrument panel.

63

Canadian models onlyHigh Beams Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Turn Signal and Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

72

０７／０４／２６　１８：４５：５３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７７　

2008 Element

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the button next to the shiftlever to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.You will also hear a beep when themaximum level is canceled byturning the knob a click to the left.

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：００　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７８　

2008 Element

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Push the lever under the left sideof the steering column all the waydown.

Move the steering wheel up ordown to the desired position.Make sure you can see theinstrument panel gauges and theindicators.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

1.

2.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment

74

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：０８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００７９　

2008 Element

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxand hatch locked when you leaveyour vehicle and the valet key at aparking facility.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks

Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALETKEY(LIGHTGRAY)

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：１４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８０　

2008 Element

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

See page for an explanation of theremote transmitter’s operation.

77

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

76

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：２４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８１　

2008 Element

－

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the passenger’s doorand the hatch. Some exterior lightswill flash twice each time you pressthe button. If you do not open eitherdoor or the hatch within 30 seconds,they will automatically relock.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press this button once tolock both doors and hatch. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK twice within 5 seconds,you will hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked. You cannot lock itif any door is not fully closed or keyis in the ignition switch.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

CONTINUED

UNLOCK

PANIC

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Immobilizer System, Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

UNLOCKBUTTON

LED LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：３２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８２　

2008 Element

＋

▽◎

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of thetransmitter by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Inserta new battery with the side facingup, and reinstall the cushion ring.Align the mark on the coverwith the mark on thetransmitter. Set the cover in placeand turn it clockwise.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the hatch, replace the battery assoon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter Care

78

ROUNDCOVER

BATTERY

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：４１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８３　

2008 Element

－

－

－－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.



CONTINUED

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)LOCK (0)

Ignition Switch

Remote Transmitter, Ignition SwitchInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：５０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８４　

2008 Element

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pulling up on the driver’s door locktab only unlocks the driver’s door.

To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull theoutside door handle and push thelock tab down or push the door lockswitch down. Release the handle,then close the door.

To unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.

To lock all of the doors and hatch,press the door lock switch on thedriver’s door, or press the lock tabdown on the driver’s door, or use thekey on the outside lock. Pressing upon the door lock switch will unlockall of the doors and the hatch.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Power Door Locks

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

80

DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TABRemoving the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４６：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８５　

2008 Element

Lock the hatch by pushing downthe lock tab on the driver’s door(see page ), or by using themaster key in the driver’s doorlock.

Lock or unlock the hatch with themaster door lock switch.

Use your master key to lock andunlock the hatch. Turn the keycounterclockwise to lock the hatch,and clockwise to unlock it.

To lock or unlock the hatch.To open the rear door, pull the reardoor handle located in the rear dooredge. The rear door can be openedonly when the front door is open.

To close the doors, close the reardoor first, then the front door. Thefront door cannot be latched withoutfirst closing the rear door. Closingthe rear door on the front door willdamage both doors.

80

CONTINUED

Door Locks

HatchRear Doors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

UNLOCK

LOCK

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：０６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８６　

2008 Element

See page for information oncargo loading. Keep the tailgate andthe hatch closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging them, andto prevent exhaust gas from gettinginto the interior. See

on page .

You can open the tailgate only whenthe hatch is open. To open thetailgate, slide the lock lever to theleft and swing down the tailgate. Toclose the tailgate, lift it up and pushit firmly until it latches.

Before closing the tailgate, makesure the hatch is raised. Closing thetailgate on the lowered hatch candamage the hatch and the tailgate.

When both the hatch and tailgate areopen, the hatch cannot be latchedwithout first closing the tailgate.

To close the hatch, lower it, thenpress down on the back edge.

With the hatch unlocked, open it bypulling the handle and lifting up.

54

152

Door Locks

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Tailgate

82

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：１３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８７　

2008 Element

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom. Adjustthe seat-back and make sure it locksinto position.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Try tomove the seat to make sure it islocked in position.

Seats

Seat Adjustments Front Seat

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：２１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８８　

2008 Element

To adjust the height of the driver’sseat, turn the dial on the outside ofthe seat bottom.

To change the angle of the rear seat-back, pull the strap at the insideedge of the seat cushion, make surethe seat-back locks into position.

Each front seat has an armrest onthe side of the seat-back. To use it,pivot it down.

On EX model

Seats

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Front Seat Armrests Rear Seat

84

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：２８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００８９　

2008 Element

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

15

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

The head restraints in the front andrear seating positions adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. To raise it, pullupward. To lower the restraint, pushthe release button sideways andpush the restraint down.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Seats

Head Restraints

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

RELEASE BUTTON

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：３５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９０　

2008 Element

You can recline the seat-backs on thefront seats so they are level with therear seat cushions, making a largecushioned area. To do this:

Adjust the front seats forward asfar as possible. Pull up the seat-back angle adjustment lever andpivot the seat-back backward untilit is level with the rear seatcushion.

Move the front seat backwarduntil it touches the rear seat.

Adjust the rear seat-back to thedesired position.

Reverse this procedure to return thefront and rear seats to the uprightposition. Make sure you install thehead restraints and the seats arelocked securely before driving.

When you return the seat-back to itsupright position, hold the seat-backto keep it from going up too quickly.

Remove the head restraints fromthe front seats (see page ), andstore them in the side pockets ofthe cargo area.

1.

2.

3.

4.

85

Reclining the Front Seats

Seats

86

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：４３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９１　

2008 Element

To create more cargo space, you canfold up each rear seat to each sidewall separately.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Pull the seat-back adjustmentstrap at the inside edge of the seatcushion and push the seat-backbackward as far as it will go.

Pull the release strap on the seatsupport, and pivot the seat towardthe vehicle’s side wall.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Folding the Rear Seats

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP RELEASE STRAP

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９２　

2008 Element

A fastening strap is attached to theinside of the seat cushion. Whilepushing the seat up and towardthe side wall, hook the fasteningstrap to the grab rail.

Fold down the seat support.

Reverse this procedure to return therear seat to the upright position.When not in use, store the fasteningstrap hook in the fabric pocket onthe bottom of the seat cushion.Make sure the seat is lockedsecurely.

4. 5.

Seats

88

GRAB RAIL

FASTENING STRAP

SEAT SUPPORT

０７／０４／２６　１８：４７：５６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９３　

2008 Element

Both seats can be removed to givemore cargo capacity. To remove aseat:

Pull the release strap on the seatsupport to unlock the seat support.

Remove the cover between theseat cushion and the side wall bypulling the tab and pulling thecover straight up.

Push the lock lever forward tounlock the seat.

1.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Removing the Rear Seats

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

RELEASE STRAP COVER

TAB STEEL HANDLELOCK LEVER

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９４　

2008 Element

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe seat. Make sure the seats aresecurely locked in place beforedriving.

Hold the steel handle next to thelock lever and the handle strap atthe outside edge of the seatcushion, and remove the entireseat by pulling it up and backward.

Always remove an unsecured seatfrom the vehicle before driving. Aseat that is not locked in place couldbe thrown about and cause injury ina sudden stop or crash.

4.

Seats

90

STEEL HANDLE

HANDLE STRAP

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：０８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９５　

2008 Element

－

－

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thepassenger’s window unintentionally.

To open/close the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down or up to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go up or down allthe way. To stop the window, pull/push on the window switch briefly.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthis happens, the power windowsystem will need to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse.1.

2.

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passenger isaway from the window beforeclosing it.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：１７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９６　

2008 Element

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

3.

4.

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

92

TABSELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：２５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９７　

2008 Element

To open a rear window, pull the levertowards you, then push it out until itlocks. To close the rear window pullthe lever towards you, then push itback. Make sure the window is fullyclosed and locked.

To lift up the rear of the skylight forventilation, pull down the lever tounlock the skylight, then push it upuntil the skylight is locked in the tilt-up position.

To close the skylight, pull down thelever to unlock the skylight, thenpush it back in place. Make sure theskylight is fully closed and locked.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).60

CONTINUED

If equipped

Rear Windows, Parking Brake, Skylight

Parking BrakeRear Windows Skylight

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：３５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９８　

2008 Element

Turn off the engine, and set theparking brake. Then pull down thelever, squeeze both sides of the pivotwhile pushing up the red tab in thelever, and pull the lever assemblyaway from the ceiling.

Push up the rear of the skylight.Standing on the tailgate with thehatch down, hold both sides of theskylight and pull it toward you toremove it from the vehicle roof.

To remove the skylight:

Skylight

94

Bef ore lif ting the skylight, make surethe roof of the vehicle is dry. Rain orremaining water af ter car-washing mayget into the f rame of the skylight. Inwinter, remove the buildup of snow onthe roof .

If you try to tilt up the skylight inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage it.

The maximum weight on the tailgate is440 lbs (200 kg).

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：４２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　００９９　

2008 Element

With the rear seats in their uprightposition, store the skylight, facedown in its bag in the cargo area.Secure the bag with four hooks onthe cargo area floor. Do not storeanything on top of the skylight.

To reinstall the skylight, make surethe air deflector is pushed down.When reinstalling the lever assembly,push in both red pivots, and alignwith the receptacle holes. Let thepivots move out until they rest in theholes securely. Make sure theskylight is fully closed and latched.

SkylightInstrum

entsand

Controls

95

An unsecured skylight can bethrown about and cause seriousinjury in a sudden stop or crash.

Make sure to store the skylightin its bag, and secure the bag tothe hooks on the cargo areafloor.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：４７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１００　

2008 Element

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF.In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

Open any door.Remove the key from the ignition.If you do not open a door, the lightfades out in about 30 seconds.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the centerposition, the light comes on whenyou open the hatch.

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you unlock the driver’s door,and fades out about 30 seconds afteryou close the door.

On EX and SC models

Interior Lights

Ceiling Light Spotlights Cargo Area Light

Ignition Switch Light

96

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

０７／０４／２６　１８：４８：５６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０１　

2008 Element

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

CARGO AREA COIN TRAYCARGO AREASIDE POCKET

DOOR POCKETS

VANITY MIRROR

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDERSSEAT-BACK POCKET

CEILING POCKET

GLOVE BOX

RADIO POCKET

CENTER LOWER POCKET

SC modelexcept SC: If equipped

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：０１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０２　

2008 Element

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, andelectrical components in the interior.

Your vehicle has one, two, or threeaccessory power sockets, dependingon the model. All models have afront accessory power socket on thedashboard above the glove box.

EX and SC models have an accessorypower socket in the cargo area onthe passenger’s side.

The SC model has one additionalsocket in the center console.

The front beverage holder isremovable. To remove it, push thetab and pull it up.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). None of the sockets willpower an automotive type cigarettelighter element. When more thanone socket is being used, thecombined power rating of theaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

On SC model

Beverage Holders Accessory Power Sockets Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

98

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：１０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０３　

2008 Element

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

If equippedSun Visor Vanity Mirror

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

99

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：１５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０４　

2008 Element

100

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：１８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０５　

2008 Element

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 102.....................Air Flow Controls . 103

.................................Ventilation . 104......................Using the Heater . 104

...........................Using the A/C . 104...........Dehumidify the Interior . 105

..............To Defog and Defrost . 105To Remove Exterior Frost

....or Ice From the Windows . 106...............To Turn Everything Off . 106

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 107............AM/FM Radio Reception . 111

Playing the XM...........................Satellite Radio . 113

................................Playing a Disc . 119.......Disc Player Error Messages . 126

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 127..................Protecting Your Discs . 128.................Radio Theft Protection . 131

..........................Setting the Clock . 132................Remote Audio Controls . 134

...............................Cruise Control . 135

FeaturesF

eatures

101

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：２２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０６　

2008 Element

Vents, Heating, and A/C

102

FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERBUTTON

MAX A/C POSITION

DEFROST POSITION

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０７　

2008 Element

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Use the mode control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardvents in all modes.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

Turn this dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and

switches to recirculation mode. Airflows from the center and side ventsin the dashboard.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).73

CONTINUED

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

Air Flow Controls

Recirculation Button

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

103

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：４３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０８　

2008 Element

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield. The heater uses engine coolant to

warm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not come on.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.The flow-through ventilation system

draws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then dischargesit through vents near the tailgate. Air conditioning places an extra load

on the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.

Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Set the mode control dial to MAXA/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to recirculation mode.Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

1.

2.3.4.

1.2.3.

1.

2.

3.

68

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:

If the interior is very warm,


Using the A/C

Using the Heater

Ventilation(fresh air mode)

104

０７／０４／２６　１８：４９：５５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１０９　

2008 Element

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

When you select or ,the system automatically turns onthe A/C. This helps to dehumidifythe air and to defog the windshield.In either mode, you cannot turn offthe A/C. When you switch toanother mode, the A/C returns to itsoriginal setting, either on or off, asindicated by the A/C indicator.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. (TheA/C indicator will not come on inU.S. vehicles, if the A/C was off tostart with)Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost

Features

105

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１０　

2008 Element

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator does not come on inU.S. vehicle, if the A/C was off tostart with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.Select to help clear therear window.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

1.

2.3.

4.

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Turn Everything Off


106

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１１　

2008 Element

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

107

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK BAR AUTO SELECTBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FMBUTTON

LX model Canadian EX and SC models

SCAN BUTTON TUNE KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

VOL/PWRKNOB

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：１８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１２　

2008 Element

Playing the AM/FM Radio

108

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FMBUTTON

U.S. EX and SC models

TUNE KNOBSCAN BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：２２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１３　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to a

lower frequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press either ( or ), thenrelease it.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds (LX model) or10 seconds (EX and SC models).

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 5 seconds (LX model)or 10 seconds (EX and SC models).When it plays a station you want tolisten to, press the SCAN button

again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the VOL/PWR knob or theAM/FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction inAM is not available.

2.

3.

4.

1.

CONTINUED

To Play the Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

109

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：３３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１４　

2008 Element

－－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Usethe TRE/BAS/SUB-W modes toadjust the tone to your liking.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the MODE orSOUND knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in thedisplay. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

Press the MODE or SOUND knobrepeatedly to display the bass (BAS),treble (TRE), balance (BAL), fader(FAD), and sub-woofer (SUB-W)settings.

To turn off auto select,AUTO SELECT Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass/Sub-Woofer

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the AM/FM Radio

110

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：４０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１５　

2008 Element

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

111

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：４９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１６　

2008 Element

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

112

０７／０４／２６　１８：５０：５５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１７　

2008 Element

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.

Satellite radio is only available on U.S.models.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

CONTINUED

U.S. EX and SC modelsXM Satellite Radio

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

113

TUNEKNOB

CATEGORYBUTTONS

XM BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY INDICATOR

CHANNEL INDICATOR

VOL/PWR KNOB DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：０２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１８　

2008 Element

－－

－

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

Inthe category mode, press eitherbutton to select another category.

To listen to the XM satellite Radio,turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Push the VOL/PWR knob to turn onthe audio system, and press the XMbutton. Adjust the volume turningthe VOL/PWR knob. The lastchannel you listened to will show inthe display.

Operating the Satellite Radio

MODETUNE

CATEGORY ( or )

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

114

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：０９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１１９　

2008 Element

－－The scan function givesyou sampling of all channels while inthe channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for 5 seconds, thenselects the next channel. When youhear a channel you want to continuelistening to, press the button.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the TUNE knob, theCATEGORY buttons, or theSCAN buttons to tune to a desiredchannel.In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button totune to it.

2.

3.

4.

1.

5.SCAN Preset


eatures

115

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：１７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２０　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

－

－

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult yourdealer.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, isnot part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘LOADING’’


116

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：２３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２１　

2008 Element

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

CONTINUED


eatures

117

SATELLITE

Signal may be blockedby mountains or largeobstacles to the south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：２８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２２　

2008 Element

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM

satellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push theVOL/PWR knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM button. Avariety of music types and styles willplay.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


118

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：３９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２３　

2008 Element

CONTINUED

Playing a DiscF

eatures

119

REPEAT INDICATOR

EJECT BUTTONCD SLOT

SEEK/SKIP BAR

CD SLOT

RANDOM INDICATOR

RANDOM BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

DISPLAY BUTTON

FOLDER KNOB

LX model Canadian EX and SC models

RANDOM INDICATOR

FOLDER INDICATOR

EJECT BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISC INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

VOL/PWRKNOB

CD/TAPE BUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：４６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２４　

2008 Element

Playing a Disc

120

RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEATBUTTON

DISPLAY BUTTON

FOLDER KNOB

RANDOM BUTTON

U.S. EX and SC models

SCANBUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

CD SLOT

FOLDER INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

DISC INDICATOR

CD/AUX BUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５１：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２５　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

－

－

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

If a file on an MP3 or WMAdisc is protected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

The disc player can also play CD-Rsand CD-RWs compressed in MP3 orWMA formats.

When playing a disc in MP3, you willsee ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. The disc,folder and track numbers aredisplayed. Each disc can hold up to400 playable files within 8 folderlayers. A disc can support amaximum number of 100 folders,and each folder can hold 255playable files.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

When playing a disc in WMA, youwill see ‘‘WMA’’ in the display. Thedisc, folder and track numbers aredisplayed. Each disc can hold up to200 files within 16 subdirectories, 8folder layers. A disc can support amaximum number of 100 folders,and each folder can hold 255playable files.

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate:8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320kbps

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

CONTINUED

On EX and SC models

To Play a Disc

Playing a DiscF

eatures

121

NOTE:

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０４／２７　１３：３８：０５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２６　

2008 Element

－ Each time youpress and release the , theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (files inMP3/WMA mode). Press andrelease the to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold or .

You will see CUE or REW in thedisplay while moving within a track.

Insert the disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it. When the system reaches theend of the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. If you press the DISP/MODE button

while playing a disc, additionalinformation (track, album, artist, etc.)may be displayed.

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3/WMAmode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theFOLDER knob to select folders inthe disc, and use the SEEK/SKIPbutton to change files.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the VOL/PWR knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

Except EX and SC models

SEEK/SKIP

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

Playing a Disc

122

０７／０４／２６　１８：５２：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２７　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

－

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat, press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds.You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder. Press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds toturn it off.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each folder inMP3/WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton. You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press the RDM button againto return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressand hold the RDM button. You willsee RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing the RDM button again orselecting a different folder with theFOLDER knob.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3/WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

Toselect a different folder, use theFOLDER knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob right to move to thebeginning of the current folder. Turnthe knob left to skip to the beginningof the previous folder.

CONTINUED

In MP3/WMA mode

On EX and SC models FOLDER-REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within aDisc)

FOLDER-RANDOMREPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER SELECTION

Playing a DiscF

eatures

123

０７／０４／２６　１８：５２：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２８　

2008 Element

－－The scan function samplesall tracks/files on the selected disc inthe order they are recorded. Toactivate scan, press and hold theSCAN button until you hear a beep.You will see SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track/file on the selected disc.Press the SCAN button again to exitscan and play the last track/filesampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button also turns off scan.

This feature,when activated, samples all files onthe selected folder in order. Toactivate folder scan, press and holdthe SCAN button until you hear abeep. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will thenplay the first file for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the first file ineach folder for 10 seconds. When itplays a file you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button or selecting a differentfolder with the FOLDER knob alsoturns off folder scan.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds (EX and SCmodels) or 15 seconds (LX model)and put it in pause mode. To beginplaying, press the CD button.

Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a disc is playing.To play the disc, press the CD button.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the VOL/PWR knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

To Stop Playing a DiscSCAN FOLDER SCAN

Playing a Disc

124

０７／０４／２６　１８：５２：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１２９　

2008 Element

－＋

－＋

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

An optional six disc changer isavailable for your vehicle. This discchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player or theradio.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

The auxiliary input jack is next to theaccessory power socket, either in thecenter console compartment or onthe dashboard, depending on themodel of your vehicle.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, pressing theAUX button allows the system toaccept auxiliary input from theconnected audio unit.

See pages and forinformation on error messages.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 5(DISC ) or the preset 6 (DISC )button. To select the previous disc,press the preset 5 (DISC ), or thepreset 6 (DISC ) to select the nextdisc in sequence.

126 127

128

If equippedAuxiliary Input Jack Operating the Optional Disc

Changer

Protecting Discs

Audio System Malfunction

Playing a DiscF

eatures

125

０７／０４／２６　１８：５２：３７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３０　

2008 Element

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For the additional information of thedamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message SolutionCause

129

::

EX and SC modelsLX model

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 129.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, sign ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirtsee page 129.Insert the disc again. If the code does notdisappear, or the disc cannot be removed,consult your dealer. Do not try to force the discout of the player.

High temperature

Track/File format notsupported

FOCUS error

Mechanical error

Servo error

Disc Player Error Messages

126

HEAT ERRORHOT

DISC

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL

PUSH EJECTERR

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL

FORMAT

０７／０４／２６　１８：５２：４５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３１　

2008 Element

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

CauseIndication Solution

: EX and SC models: LX model

FOCUS error

No disc in the magazine

Mechanical error

High temperature

No magazine in thechanger

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 129.Insert disc.

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 129.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert magazine.

Disc Changer Error MessagesF

eatures

127

DISC ERROR

DISC

NO DISCNO

MECH ERROR

ERR

HEAT ERRORHOT

EJECTEJEC

０７／０４／２６　１８：５２：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３２　

2008 Element

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality CDs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the recordedsurface of the disc, causing skippingor other problems. Remove thesepieces by rubbing the inner andouter edges with the side of a pencilor pen.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

128

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：００　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３３　

2008 Element

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

The disc player/changer has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated below, it maybecome stuck inside and damage theaudio unit.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information ofRecommended Discs

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

129

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Sealed With PlasticRing

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３４　

2008 Element

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.

Protecting Your Discs

130

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：２１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３５　

2008 Element

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons to enter thecode. The code is on the radio codecard included in your owner’smanual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

Your vehicle’s audio system maydisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You should have received a radiocode card that lists your audiosystem’s code and serial numbers. Itis best to store this card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system’sserial number in this owner’s manual.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

On EX and SC models

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

131

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３６　

2008 Element

You can use the R button to quicklyset the time to the nearest hour.Press the R button while pressingthe CLOCK button. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

To set the hour, press the H buttonwhile pressing the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button until the hour advancesto the desired time. Change theminute by pressing the M buttonwhile pressing the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button until the minuteadvances to the desired time.

Press and hold the CLOCK buttonuntil the numbers flash and you heara beep. Change the hour by pressingthe H button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minute by pressing the M buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

LX model

On U.S. EX and SC models

Setting the Clock

132

CLOCKBUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTON

TIME DISPLAY

M BUTTON R BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTONTIME DISPLAY

H BUTTON

M BUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：３５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３７　

2008 Element

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press the R(RESET) button to set the clockback to the previous hour. If thedisplayed time is after the half hour,pressing R sets the clock forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

When you are finished, press theCLOCK button again.

On Canadian EX and SC models

Setting the ClockF

eatures

133

H BUTTON R BUTTONM BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

TIME DISPLAY

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：４２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３８　

2008 Element

▲ ▼The middle button adjusts thevolume up ( ) or down ( ). Pressthe top or bottom of the button andhold it until the desired volume isreached, then release it.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push the CHbutton. You will see the disc andtrack number in the display.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM orCD (if a CD is loaded). On modelswith satellite radio system, you canalso select XM1 or XM2.

The CHANNEL button has twofunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing aCD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press this button, thesystem advances to the next presetstation on the band you are listeningto. You will see the number of theselected Preset button in the display.To change bands, or to change fromFM1 to FM2 or XM1 to XM2 (ifequipped), press the MODE button.

On EX and SC models

Remote Audio Controls

134

MODEBUTTON

CH BUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：４８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１３９　

2008 Element

Push in the cruise control masterbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

The main switch can be lefton, even when the system is not inuse.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using Cruise Control

Cruise ControlF

eatures

135

NOTE:

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５３：５５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４０　

2008 Element

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

136

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：０３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４１　

2008 Element

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remembers thepreviously set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorwill come on. The vehicle willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Pressing the cruise control masterbutton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the cruise control masterbutton.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this, thevehicle will slow down about 1mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes cruise control tocancel.

Cruise Control

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

Features

137

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：１３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４２　

2008 Element

138

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：１６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４３　

2008 Element

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 140.................Fuel Recommendation . 140

.........Service Station Procedures . 141....................................Refueling . 141

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 142

...................................Oil Check . 143.............Engine Coolant Check . 143

...............................Fuel Economy . 144...Accessories and Modifications . 147

.............................Carrying Cargo . 149

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

139

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４４　

2008 Element

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

On vehicles with manual transmission

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

140

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４５　

2008 Element

Close the fuel fill door.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Outside of the vehicle, open thefuel fill door by pulling its notchededge.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

236

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

141

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：４０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４６　

2008 Element

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole inthe hood.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot(30 cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.The hood latch handle is abovethe ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle upto release it. Lift up the hood.

1. 2. 3.

To Close the Hood:

Opening and Closing the Hood

Service Station Procedures

142

LATCH

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE SUPPORT ROD

CLIP

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：４８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４７　

2008 Element

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange tab).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

196

190

193

Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Adding Engine Oil

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

143

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

RESERVE TANKMAX

MIN

０７／０４／２６　１８：５４：５９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４８　

2008 Element

－

－－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

144

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０７／０４／２７　１３：３８：１７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１４９　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

An under-inflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

191CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

193

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Before

Driving

145

０７／０４／２６　１８：５５：２１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５０　

2008 Element

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

146

Miles perGallon

100 Kilometers

Gallonsof fuel

Milesdriven

Liter L per100 km

０７／０４／２６　１８：５５：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５１　

2008 Element

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

238

Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

147

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５５：３９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５２　

2008 Element

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Here are some examples:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with somenon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents, and are notcompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

148

０７／０４／２６　１８：５５：４６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５３　

2008 Element

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Center console (SC model)Roof-rack (if installed)Seat-back bungees (EX model)

Cargo area (including rear seatswhen they are folded down, foldedto the side, or removed)

Seat-back pocket (EX and SCmodels)

Door pockets

Ceiling pocket (EX and SCmodels)

Glove boxCargo area side pockets

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

149

CARGO AREA SIDE POCKET CEILING POCKET

GLOVE BOXCARGO AREA

CENTER CONSOLE

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

DOOR POCKETS

０７／０４／２６　１８：５５：５６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５４　

2008 Element

－The maximum load for your vehicleis 675 lbs for U.S. vehicles, and 308kg for Canadian vehicles

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

(1)

(2)

(3)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

150

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：０６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５５　

2008 Element

－ ×

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo,and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label onthe driver’s doorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

(4)

(5)

(6)

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

151

Max Load (675 lbs)

Max Load (675 lbs)

Max Load (675 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Cargo Weight(75 lbs)



０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：２０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５６　

2008 Element

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals, the seat operation, orthe proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you fold the rear seats down orup, or remove them, tie downitems that could be thrown aboutthe vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. Also, keep all cargobelow the bottom of the windows.If it is higher, it could interferewith the proper operation of theside curtain airbags.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the informationthat came with your roof rack.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate or the hatch, exhaust gascan enter the passenger area. Toavoid the possibility of

, follow theinstructions on page .54

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbonmonoxide poisoning

152

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５７　

2008 Element

If the cords are not installed, routeone cord through the loops as shown.To attach the hooks, press the top ofthe hook down, and slide to thedesired position, then release. Adjustas needed.

The driver’s seat-back and left rearseat-back are equipped withadjustable bungee cords to holdmedium-sized, lightweight objects.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

On EX model

Carrying Cargo

Seat-Back BungeeOptional Separation Net

Before

Driving

153

LOOP

ADJUSTABLE BUNGEE CORD

HOOK

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：３４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５８　

2008 Element

154

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：３６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１５９　

2008 Element

........................Driving Guidelines . 156

........................Preparing to Drive . 157.......................Starting the Engine . 158

...................Manual Transmission . 159..............Automatic Transmission . 161

...........................................Parking . 165.............................Braking System . 166

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 167Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 169Vehicle Stability Assist

............................(VSA) System . 171...........................Towing a Trailer . 173

Off-Highway Driving..................................Guidelines . 179

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer or drive off-highway.

DrivingD

riving

155

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：４０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６０　

2008 Element

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Your vehicle is equipped with a four-wheel drive (4WD) system. Whenthe system senses a loss of front-wheel traction, it automaticallytransfers some power to the rearwheels. This gives you bettertraction and mobility.

You still need to exercise the samecare when accelerating, steering, andbraking that you would in a two-wheel drive vehicle.

Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Four-wheel drive models

See page for off-highway drivingguidelines.

179

Driving Guidelines

156

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：４８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６１　

2008 Element

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors, hatch, andtailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

59

74

92

83

16

Preparing to DriveD

riving

157

０７／０４／２６　１８：５６：５７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６２　

2008 Element

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.Press the clutch pedal down all the

way. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

1.

2.

3.

4. 6.

5.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

158

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .76

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：０６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６３　

2008 Element

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse. When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause the clutch to wear outfaster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

Manual TransmissionD

riving

159

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６４　

2008 Element

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

The engine speed limiter only workswhen you upshift; engine speed isnot limited during downshifts.Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Manual Transmission

160

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：１８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６５　

2008 Element

－

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal, push therelease button, and pull the levertoward you. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.Avoid rapid acceleration, and havethe transmission checked by yourdealer as soon as possible.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the shift lever. Make sure yourfoot are off accelerator pedal.

CONTINUED

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

3

3

3

3

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Park (P)

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

161

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

D BUTTON3

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６６　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to reverse. To shiftfrom reverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

To use D , press theD button when the shift lever is inthe ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi-lar to D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

163

33

3

3

Automatic Transmission

Neutral (N)

Reverse (R)

Shift Lock Release

Drive (D)

Drive (D )3

162

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：３３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６７　

2008 Element

－－This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.To help reduce wheel spin.When driving downhill with atrailer.

This position locks thetransmission in first gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D , and D, you can operate thetransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

For more power when climbing. Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

1.

2.

3

CONTINUED

Second (2) First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter

Shift Lock Release

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

163

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：４３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６８　

2008 Element

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover next to theshift lever. Using a flat-tipscrewdriver, carefully pry on theedge of the cover to remove it.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the right side. Pressthe brake pedal, and restart theengine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission

164

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：５０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１６９　

2008 Element

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors and the hatch withthe key.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

165

０７／０４／２６　１８：５７：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７０　

2008 Element

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.Resting your foot on the pedal keeps

the brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

Braking System Design

Braking System

166

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７１　

2008 Element

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock BrakesBrake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

167

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：１０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７２　

2008 Element

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

237

237

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

168

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：２０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７３　

2008 Element

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.

efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressureindicator to come on.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tire

values, have your dealer check the

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressure

check and adjust your tire pressure

may become overinflated. However,

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

the tire pressures monthly.

222

212

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Indicator

Driving

169

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７４　

as soon as possible, and inflate them

system as soon as possible.

in cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tireLow Tire Pressure

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires is

to the proper pressure as indicated on

significantly underinflated. You

the vehicle’s tire information placard.

should stop and check your tires

pressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specified

Under-inflation also reduces fuel

indicator to come on. Or, if you

the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires are

monitored, you must manually check

overinflated.

Although your tire pressure is

2008 Element

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicleplacard and this owner’s manual (seepage ).

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have to

dealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire with

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted inside

must use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always have

qualified technician.

250

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring

170

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：３９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７５　

pressure to be sure it is correct.After several miles (kilometers)driving with the compact spare tire,the TPMS indicator comes on and the

Manually check the spare tire

System (TPMS) Indicator

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.

the compact spare tire, the low tire

Replace the flat tire with the compact

your tires serviced by your dealer or

spare tire (see page 222).

pressure indicator stays on. This

low tire pressure indicator goes off.

monitoring the spare tire pressure.

the tire behind the valve stem. You

is normal; the system is not

The low tire pressure or the TPMS

As required by the FCC:

indicator will go off, after severalmiles (kilometers) driving, whenyou replace the spare tire with thespecified regular tire equipped with

Have the flat tire repaired by your

the tire pressure monitor sensor.

replace the tire pressure sensor.

2008 Element

CONTINUED

The VSA system indicator (see page) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSAsystem. The VSA activation indicatorwill also come on.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

64

64



Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Driving

171

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：４９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７６　

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

2008 Element

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This button is under the driver’s sidevent. Press it to turn the VSA systemon or off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Pressing the switch again turns thesystem back on.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

213

VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

172

VSA OFF SWITCH

０７／０４／２６　１８：５８：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７７　

2008 Element

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 % of the totaltrailer weight. Too much tongueload reduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.

Be sure to read theon page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg).Towing a trailer that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

179

Driving Off-Highway Guidelines section

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a TrailerD

riving

173

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：０５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７８　

2008 Element

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 % of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40 % toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

on the front axle

on the rear axle

Checking Loads

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

174

2,300 lbs (1,045 kg)

2,205 lbs (1,000 kg)

4,450 lbs (2,020 kg)

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１７９　

2008 Element

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure thehighest quality equipment, purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Honda requires that any trailer witha total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) ormore be equipped with its ownelectric or surge-type brakes.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a TrailerD

riving

175

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：２０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８０　

2008 Element

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localtrailer dealer or rental agency for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

176

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８１　

2008 Element

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ on the nextpage for additional gear information.)

173 174

212

CONTINUED

3

Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

Driving

177

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：３６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８２　

2008 Element

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

bottom

3

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

178

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：４５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８３　

2008 Element

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properly,and do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages

and ).

Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner’s manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted withyour vehicle before you leave thepavement.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, such as campgrounds, picnicsites, and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trail-blazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

150 173

General Information Important Safety Precautions

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

179

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

０７／０４／２６　１８：５９：５４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８４　

2008 Element

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second (2) gear willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

do not try toturn around

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes

180

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：０３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８５　

2008 Element

Avoid driving through deep water. Ifyou encounter water in your route (asmall stream or large puddle, forexample), evaluate it carefully beforegoing ahead. Make sure it is shallow,flowing slowly, and has firm groundunderneath. If you are not sure ofthe depth or the ground, turn aroundand find another route.

Driving through deep water can alsodamage your vehicle. The water canget into the transmission anddifferential, diluting the lubricantand causing an eventual failure. Itcan also wash the grease out of thewheel bearings.

Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,or other surfaces where you couldget stuck. If you do happen to getstuck because of inclement weatheror other conditions, choose a safeand appropriate course of action.

You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

If you spin the wheels excessivelytrying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat the components of the4-wheel drive system. If this happens,the 4-wheel drive system shuts offand only the front wheels receivepower. If this happens, stop andallow everything to cool down. The4-wheel drive system will work againafter its temperature drops.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage it.

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream 4-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Driving

181

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８６　

2008 Element

182

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：１４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８７　

2008 Element

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 184....................Maintenance Minder . 185

..............................Fluid Locations . 192........................Adding Engine Oil . 193

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 194

..............................Engine Coolant . 196....................Windshield Washers . 197

.......................Transmission Fluid . 198Automatic Transmission

.......................................Fluid . 198...Manual Transsmission Fluid . 199

.................Rear Differential Fluid . 200................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 200

....................Power Steering Fluid . 201............Cleaning the Body Panels . 201

.............................................Lights . 202................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 209

.....................................Floor Mats . 209..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 210

.................................Wiper Blades . 210...........................................Wheels . 212

...............................................Tires . 212...................Checking the Battery . 218

.............................Vehicle Storage . 219

265

MaintenanceM

aintenance

183

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８８　

2008 Element

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

184

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：２８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１８９　

2008 Element

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page ).

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

68

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

185

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：３６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９０　

2008 Element

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the timeis coming soon to take your vehiclein for the required maintenance.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayedabove the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.

Maintenance Minder

186

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：４２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９１　

2008 Element

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

188

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

187

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

０７／０４／２６　１９：００：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９２　

2008 Element

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, pressand release the select/reset knob.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on thefollowing.

1.

2.191

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

188

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：００　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９３　

2008 Element

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.3.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

189

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：０８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９４　

2008 Element

＃

－

－

－

－

－

－

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

143

143

198

200

213

202

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

190

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：１８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９５　

2008 Element

＊

＊

＃

＃

＊

＃

＊

＊

Maintenance Minder

191

: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of the maintenance items in the information display, replacethe brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

2 :

190

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds results in higher transmission temperatures.This requires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the maintenanceminder. If you regularly drive your vehicle underthese conditions, have the transmission fluidchanged at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every30,000 miles (48,000 km) .

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolantReplace rear differential fluid (4WD model only)

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

Automatic transmission

6

1

1

2

Main

tenance

Min

der

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９６　

2008 Element

Fluid Locations

192

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

POWERSTEERING FLUID(Red cap)

ENGINE OILDIPSTICK(Orange tab)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９７　

2008 Element

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes, and recheck the oillevel. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APIcertification seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda motor oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API certification seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

193

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：３８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９８　

2008 Element

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API certification seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the maintenanceminder display.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

194

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：４６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０１９９　

2008 Element

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

4.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Changing the Engine Oil and FilterM

aintenance

195

OIL FILTER

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０１：５５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２００　

2008 Element

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

196

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：０２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０１　

2008 Element

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

4.

5.

2.

1.

3.

6.

63

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield WashersM

aintenance

197

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：１３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０２　

2008 Element

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

3.

4.

2.

1.

5.

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid

198

DIPSTICK

LOWERMARK

UPPERMARKHOT

MARK

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：２２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０３　

2008 Element

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle on levelground. Remove the transmissionfiller bolt, and carefully feel insidethe bolt hole with your finger. Thefluid level should be up to the edgeof the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely as

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

6.

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

199

Correct Level

WASHER FILLER BOLT

(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：３１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０４　

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1

not mix with other transmission fluids.Using transmission fluid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission. Damageresulting f rom the use of transmissionf luid other than Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Honda

shown in the illustration.

new vehicle warranty.

2008 Element

Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid II only.Do not use automatic transmissionfluid (ATF).

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the time and distancerecommendations shown on themaintenance minder display. Haveyour dealer replace the reardifferential fluid.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation shown onthe maintenance minder display.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

4WD model onlyRear Differential Fluid Brake Fluid

Rear Differential Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

200

MAX

MIN

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：４０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０５　

2008 Element

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

To clean the gray composite bodypanels, wash them with soap andwater only. Do not apply wax to thepanels; it will cause discoloration.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

If equipped with body panels

Manual Transmission only

Cleaning the Body Panels

Power Steering FluidClutch Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid, Cleaning the Body PanelsM

aintenance

201

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

MAX

MAX

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０６　

2008 Element

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified technician.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. Handle it by its steel base andprotect the glass from contact withyour skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, two on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its baseand protect the glass from contactwith your skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Open the hood.If you need to change theheadlight bulb on the driver’s side,remove the front end of the airintake duct by pulling it out.

1.

On SC model

On all models except SCOn all models except SCHeadlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

202

AIR INTAKE DUCT

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０２：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０７　

2008 Element

Reinstall the rubber weather seal.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘TOP.’’

Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

(Driver’s side)Install the front end of the airintake duct.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot the wireout of the way, then remove thebulb.

The high beam headlight bulb andthe low beam headlight bulb arereplaced the same way.

Open the hood.If you need to change theheadlight bulb on the driver’s side,remove the front end of the airintake duct by pulling it out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

On SC model

LightsM

aintenance

203

AIR INTAKE DUCT

０７／０４／２６　１９：０３：１０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０８　

2008 Element

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Driver’s side)Install the front end of the airintake duct.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

2.

Lights

Replacing a Front Parking/TurnSignal Light Bulb

204

TAB

On all models except SC

On SC model

０７／０４／２６　１９：０３：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２０９　

2008 Element

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Place a cloth between the trim ofthe lens and the body, at the top ofthe lens. Remove the front sidemarker light assembly by carefullyprying on the trim of the lens witha small flat-tip screwdriver.

The front parking/turn signal lightis next to the headlight bulb. Onthe driver’s side, remove the frontend of the air intake duct bypulling it out (see page ).

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Install the front end of the airintake duct.

1. 2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. (Driver’s side)

202

CONTINUED


Lights

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

Maintenance

205

SCREWDRIVER

CLOTH

LIGHTASSEMBLY

LIGHT ASSEMBLY

SOCKET

０７／０４／２６　１９：０３：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１０　

2008 Element


The front side marker light is nextto the headlight bulb. On thedriver’s side, remove the front endof the air intake duct by pulling itout (see page ).

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the light assembly back intothe body, bottom first. Push on thetop edge until it snaps into place.



Install the front end of the airintake duct.


1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

4.

5.

6.

203

On SC model

Lights

206

０７／０４／２６　１９：０３：３９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１１　

2008 Element



When reinstalling the taillightassembly, first place the two pinsin the holes in place. Tighten thetwo mounting bolts.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Open the hatch and the tailgate.Remove the two mounting screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver,and remove the taillight assemblyfrom the body by pulling it back.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: brake/taillight, turn signal light or back-up light.

6.

7.

5.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Maintenance

207

SOCKET

SOCKET

SOCKETSCREW

SCREW

TAILLIGHT ASSEMBLY

０７／０４／２６　１９：０３：４８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１２　

2008 Element

Open the hatch. Remove the lightassembly cover by pushing in onthe tabs on both sides and pullingthe cover down.


Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Put the lens back into the lightassembly, right side first. Push onthe left edge until it snaps intoplace.

Using a cloth to prevent scratches,insert a small flat-tip screwdriverbetween the left edge of the lensand the housing. The lens willcome down.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

208

COVERTAB TAB

BULB

LENSSCREWDRIVER

HOUSINGLENS

CLOTH

０７／０４／２６　１９：０３：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１３　

2008 Element

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.Press the brake pedal to makesure the new bulb is working.Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.Put the cover back onto the lightassembly. Push it on until it locksin place.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward, possiblyinterfering with the pedals, orbackwards, making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

If equipped

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor MatsM

aintenance

209

LOOP

BULBSOCKET

０７／０４／２６　１９：０４：０７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１４　

2008 Element

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Front:Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

Raise the wiper arm off the hatchglass and hold it.

Rear:

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats. 1.

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

Wiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter

210

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damagethe hood and the arms.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０４：１７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１５　

2008 Element

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield or the hatch glass.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

If you are changing the rear wiperblade, go to step 6.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull up firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

5.

6.

7.

4.2.

3.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

211

REINFORCEMENT

BLADEHOLDER

BLADE

LOCK TAB

０７／０４／２６　１９：０４：２５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１６　

2008 Element

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

169

If equipped

Tires Inflation GuidelinesWheels

Wheels, Tires

212

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０４：３４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１７　

2008 Element

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

CONTINUED

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front:

Rear:

Front/Rear:

All models except SC

SC model

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Maintenance

213

P215/70R16 99S33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P225/55R18 97H

０７／０４／２６　１９：０４：４６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１８　

2008 Element

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page .

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

251

253

Tires

Tire Inspection

Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

214

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０４／２６　１９：０４：５７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２１９　

2008 Element

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

Both the ABS and VSA work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

CONTINUED

Replacing Tires and WheelsTire RotationTire Maintenance

TiresM

aintenance

215

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：０７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２０　

2008 Element

＋

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

Wheels:

Tires:

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

253

251

(SC model)

(SC model)

(On all models except SC)

(On all models except SC)

Tires

Snow Tires

Winter Driving

Wheel and Tire Specifications

216

16 x 6 1/2JJ

18 x 7JJ

P215/70R16 99S

P225/55R18 97H

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２１　

2008 Element

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, use only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners, on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Cable-type:SCC Super Z6 SZ 139

SC model


Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance

217

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：２５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２２　

2008 Element

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with a

cloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).132

131

On EX and SC models

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

218

TEST INDICATORWINDOW

POSITIVE TERMINAL

NEGATIVE TERMINAL

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：３３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２３　

2008 Element

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

219

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：４３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２４　

2008 Element

220

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：４５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２５　

2008 Element

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 222....................Changing a Flat Tire . 223

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 229................................Jump Starting . 231

..............If the Engine Overheats . 233.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 235..........Charging System Indicator . 235

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 236...............Brake System Indicator . 237

..............................................Fuses . 238..............................Fuse Locations . 241

......................Emergency Towing . 243

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

221

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：４９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２６　

2008 Element

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with the compactspare tire. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

172

Compact Spare Tire

222

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０４／２６　１９：０５：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２７　

2008 Element

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the hatch and the tailgate.

The spare tire, jack, and tools areunder the cargo area floor.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

223

TOOLS

SPARE TIRE

JACK

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：０６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２８　

2008 Element

Push the rear edge of the handleto raise the handle loop and pull upthe loop to raise the cargo areafloor.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of the cargo area.

Remove the tools and the jack. Toremove the jack, turn the jack’send bracket counterclockwise toloosen it.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel nut wrench.

8.

7.

6.5.

Changing a Flat Tire

224

WHEEL NUTSJACK

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：１３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２２９　

2008 Element

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

9. 10. 11.

CONTINUED


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

225

EXTENSION

JACKING POINTS WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３０　

2008 Element

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

13.

12.LX model


226

WHEEL COVER

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUTS

BRAKE HUB

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３１　

2008 Element

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools.

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and store it in the sparetire well.

Remove the wing bolt on the sparetire mount, and pivot the arm 90°to the upright position. Thentighten the wing bolt securely.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

the same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

18.

16.

17.

14.

15.

CONTINUED


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

227

WING BOLT

ARM

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：３４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３２　

2008 Element

Remove the small round plug fromthe cargo area floor by pushing itfrom the back side to make a hole.Store the removed plug in a placeyou can easily remember.

Reinstall the cargo area floor.Place the flat tire face down on thecargo area floor.

Align the center of the flat tirewith the hole in the cargo areafloor. Remove the spacer conefrom the wing bolt, turn it over,and put it back on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt to the spare tiremount through the hole in thecargo area floor.

19. 20.

21.

22.


228

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：４０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３３　

2008 Element

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged (see

on page ).

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in Park or neutral.

Check these things:

218

231

243

231

CONTINUED

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

229

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：４９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３４　

2008 Element

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem (see

on page ).62

158

238

243

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Won’t Start

230

０７／０４／２６　１９：０６：５５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３５　

2008 Element

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (Manual)or Park (Automatic), and set theparking brake.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

231

BOOSTER BATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：０３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３６　

2008 Element

＋

＋

－

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapon your vehicle as shown. Do notconnect this jumper cable to anyother part of the engine.

4.

5.

6.

7.

3.

Jump Starting

232

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３７　

2008 Element

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(Manual) or Park (Automatic),and set the parking brake. Turnoff all the accessories, and turn onthe hazard indicator.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

233

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３８　

2008 Element

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

9.

8.7.

6.

5.

11.

10.

243

243

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

234

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２３９　

2008 Element

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

1.

2.

4.

3.

143

193

243

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

235

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：３６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４０　

2008 Element

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It takes atleast three days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for more information (seepage ).259

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes EmissionsTesting

236

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：４３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４１　

2008 Element

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator (red)comes on while driving, the brakefluid level is probably low. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

243200 Emergency

Towing

Brake SystemIndicator (Red)

Brake System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

237

CanadaU.S.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４２　

2008 Element

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe steering column. To remove thefuse box lid, turn the knobscounterclockwise and pull the lid outof its hinges.

The vehicle’s fuses are located intwo fuse boxes. The under-hood fusebox is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

241 242

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

238

TAB

UNDER-HOOD INTERIOR

KNOBS

０７／０４／２６　１９：０７：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４３　

2008 Element

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse boxes bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

3. 4. 5.

CONTINUED

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

239

FUSE

BLOWN

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：０４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４４　

2008 Element

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code(see page ).

6.

131

On EX and SC models

Fuses

240

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：０９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４５　

2008 Element

＊

＊

＋

＋＋

＊

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

6789

10111213141516171819202122232425

Power Window RelayAMPAccessory, RadioRear WiperMeterNot UsedIG2 Daytime running lightsSRSRemote Control MirrorsLAF Heater

B Ignition RelayFuel PumpFront Accessory Power SocketTurn Signal LightsFront WiperNot UsedPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedNot Used

7.5 A20 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A10 A10 A20 A15 A15 A15 A

7.5 A20 A

20 A20 A

123

45

10 A10 A

10 A

Not UsedB ACCB Daytime running lights /

TPMSIG1 ACGNot Used 1 : Canadian models

1

1

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

241

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：１５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４６　

2008 Element

－－

No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

123456789

1011121314151617181920

Condenser FanSmall LightInterior LightCooling Fan MotorHazardIGPHorn, StopDBWBack UpVSA MotorRear DefrosterHeater MotorPower Window MainOptionLeft HeadlightDoor LockRight HeadlightVSA MTR FSRBatteryIG1 MainSpare Fuses

30 A15 A

7.5 A20 A15 A15 A15 A15 A10 A30 A20 A40 A40 A40 A15 A15 A15 A30 A

100 A50 A

21 25 7.5A 30A

Fuse Locations

242

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：２０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４７　

2008 Element

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Emergency TowingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

243

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of the 4WDsystem. It should be transported on af lat-bed truck or trailer.

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：２４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４８　

2008 Element

244

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：２６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２４９　

2008 Element

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 246................................Specifications . 248

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 251

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 251.................................Treadwear . 251

......................................Traction . 251.............................Temperature . 252

.................................Tire Labeling . 253Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required.............Federal Explanation . 254

.......................Emissions Controls . 256.....................The Clean Air Act . 256

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 256

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 256

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 256

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 257....................PGM-FI System . 257

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 257

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 257

....................Replacement Parts . 257..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 258

........................Emissions Testing . 259

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

245

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：３０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５０　

2008 Element

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb(front edge of rear door), and isstamped on the engine compartmentbulkhead. The VIN is also providedin bar code on the certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

246

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：３４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５１　

2008 Element

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

247

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBERMANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：３８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５２　

2008 Element

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊＊

Specifications

248

Dimensions Seating Capacities

Engine

Weights

169.3 in (4,300 mm)

62.5 in (1,587 mm)62.3 in (1,582 mm)62.1 in (1,578 mm)62.1 in (1,577 mm)101.4 in (2,575 mm)

70.4 in (1,788 mm)71.5 in (1,815 mm)

Length

WidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

170.9 in (4,341 mm)170.3 in (4,326 mm)

69.4 in (1,763 mm)

TotalFrontRear

422

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

9.7 : 1IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb (frontedge of rear door).

NGK:DENSO:

Front

Rear

1 :2 :3 :

LX modelEX modelSC model

1, 2

3

1, 2

3

1

3

2

1, 2

3

０７／０４／２６　１９：０８：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５３　

2008 Element

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

249

Capacities

Fuel tank

Engine oil15.9 US gal (60 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Enginecoolant

Automatictransmissionfluid

Manualtransmissionfluid

Reardifferentialfluid (4WD)Windshield washer reservoir 4.8 US qt (4.5 )

1.3 US qt (1.2 )1.1 US qt (1.0 )2.3 US qt (2.2 )2.4 US qt (2.3 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )7.4 US qt (7.0 )7.6 US qt (7.2 )

2.7 US qt (2.6 )

1.93 US gal (7.3 )1.37 US gal (5.2 )

1.90 US gal (7.2 )1.35 US gal (5.1 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engineIncluding the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 )

Approx. AutomaticTransmission

ManualTransmission

1 :2 :

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotalChange

4WD2WD

Total4WD2WD

ChangeTotal

4WD2WD

ChangeTotal

Change

Including filterWithout filter

Total

2

2

1

０７／０４／２６　１９：０９：０３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５４　

2008 Element

－－

－

－－

－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

Specifications

250

Air Conditioning Fuses

Battery

Lights

Tires

Alignment

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

ND-OIL8

12 V 60/55 W (H4/HB2)

0°13’0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0.0 in (0 mm)

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Interior

Under-hood

Capacity

HeadlightsHeadlights High BeamHeadlights Low BeamFront turn signal/parkinglightsFront side marker lights

Rear turn signal lightsBrake/TaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsCargo area lightHigh-mount brake light 12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V

12 V

21 W10 W8 W10 W3 CP18 W (21 CP)21/5 W21 W

3 CP

21/5 W

12 V 60 W12 V 55 W

12 V

12 V 5 W

P215/70R16 99S

1°00’0°24’

Size

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )P225/55R18 97H

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

28/8 W

1°50’

Toe-in

Camber

Caster1°06’

12 V 47 AH/20 HR12 V 38 AH/5 HR

See page 241 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.See page 242 or the fuse boxcover.

Front/Rear

Front

Rear

Spare

FrontRearFront

Rear

Front

(HB3)(H11)

1 :2 :3 :

LX model

SC modelEX model

1, 2

3

3

1, 2

3

1, 2

3

2, 3

1, 2

1, 2

3

3

1, 2

3

1, 2

1, 2

3

3

０７／０４／２６　１９：０９：２９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５５　

2008 Element

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)TechnicalInform

ation

251

０７／０４／２６　１９：０９：３７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５６　

2008 Element

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

252

０７／０４／２６　１９：０９：４２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５７　

2008 Element

－

－

－－

－

－－

－

－－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer’sidentification mark.Tire type code.Date of manufacture.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

P

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X2202

21570

99

S

YearWeek

CONTINUED

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)Tire Size

253

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)

(1)

(2)(3)(4)

(1) Tire Size(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)(3) Maximum Tire Pressure(4) Maximum Tire Load

DOT B97R FW6X 2202P215/70R16 99S

０７／０４／２７　１３：３８：３４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５８　

2008 Element

－

－

－

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Max Press

Max Load

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

254

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：０５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２５９　

2008 Element

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal ExplanationTechnicalInform

ation

255

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６０　

2008 Element

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

256

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：１９　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６１　

2008 Element

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, and threeway catalytic converter. These threesystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems. The emissions control systems are

covered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement PartsPGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

257

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：２７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６２　

2008 Element

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

258

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：３３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６３　

2008 Element

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the fuel tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal and let the engine idle for 20seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

1.

2.

4.

3.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

259

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：４１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６４　

2008 Element

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (Automatic) or 5th (Manual).Do not use cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

260

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：４７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６５　

2008 Element

....Customer Service Information . 262....................Warranty Coverages . 263

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 264

.....................Authorized Manuals . 265

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

261

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：５０　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６６　

2008 Element

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

246

Customer Service Information

262

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

０７／０４／２６　１９：１０：５８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６７　

2008 Element

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

263

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：０７　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６８　

2008 Element

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:

.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

264

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：１２　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２６９　

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from

Jersey Avenue, SE. , Washington,

2008 Element

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)

Authorized ManualsA

uthorizedM

anuals

265

Form Description

2008 Honda Element Service Manual

2008 Honda Element

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2008 Honda Element Body Repair Manual

2008 Honda Element Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Element Honda Service History

2008 Honda Element Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SCV06

61SCV06EL

61SCV30

31SCV650

31SCVM30

31SCVQ50

HON-R

www. helminc. com

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：２１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７０　

2008 Element

266

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：２３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７１　

2008 Element

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 147ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 79..............Accessory Power Sockets . 98

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 194.........Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 24...Airbags, Additional Information . 24...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

.............................Airbag Service . 35How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 34How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 27

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32........................SRS Components . 24

..............Air Conditioning System . 102.........................................Usage . 103

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 213

......................................Alignment . 250

......................................Antifreeze . 196Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 61, 168...................................Operation . 167

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 131.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 79

......................Armrests, Front Seat . 84................................Audio System . 107

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22.............Automatic Speed Control . 135..............Automatic Transmission . 161

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 249...............Checking Fluid Level . 198

.......................................Shifting . 161.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 161

................Shift Lever Positions . 161....................Shift Lock Release . 163

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 125

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 60, 235............................Jump Starting . 231

..............................Maintenance . 218............................Specifications . 250

..............................Before Driving . 139..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 20

...........................Beverage Holders . 98...................................Body Panels . 201

..................................Booster Seats . 52Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 167.............Break-in, New Linings . 140

....................Bulb Replacement . 207...........................................Fluid . 200

.........................................Parking . 93.................System Indicator . 60, 237........................Wear Indicators . 167

.............................Braking System . 166.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 140

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72........................Brights, Headlights . 71

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：２８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７２　

2008 Element

＊＊

＊

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 207

..............................Brake Lights . 207................Front Parking Lights . 204

........Front Side Marker Lights . 205.................................Headlights . 202

....................High-mount Brake . 208

....................Rear License Plate . 208............................Specifications . 250

....................Turn Signal Lights . 204..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 202

................................Bungee Cords . 153

............................Capacities Chart . 249.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

.............................Carrying Cargo . 149.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 128...................................CD Changer . 125

.......................CD Error Message . 126.......CD Changer Error Message . 127

.......................................CD Player . 119.................................Ceiling Pocket . 97

........................Certification Label . 246

............................................Chains . 217....................Changing a Flat Tire . 223

.................................Changing Oil . 194........................................How to . 194......................................When to . 185

...Charging System Indicator . 60, 235............Checklist, Before Driving . 157

.....................................Child Safety . 37Child Seats

......LATCH Anchorage System . 46...........................Lower Anchors . 46

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50

..........Children, Protecting Larger . 51............Cleaning the Body Panels . 201

..............................................Clock . 132.........................Clock, Setting the . 132

...................................Clutch Fluid . 201........................CO in the Exhaust . 256

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 158..............................Compact Spare . 222

.................Consumer Information . 262.............Controls, Instruments and . 57

Coolant........................................Adding . 196

....................................Checking . 143.........................Proper Solution . 196

...................Temperature Gauge . 68Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 256................Cruise Control Indicator . 62............Cruise Control Operation . 135

................Cup (Beverage) Holders . 98.............Customer Service Office . 262

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 4, 58

............Daytime Running Lights . 72.......................................Indicator . 62

.................................Dead Battery . 231.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 264

........................Defog and Defrost . 105................Defogger, Rear Window . 73..............Defrosting the Windows . 105

..........................Differential Fluid . 200....................................Dimensions . 248

...............Dimming the Headlights . 71Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 198..................................Engine Oil . 143

..........................Directional Signals . 71

Index

D

C

II

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：３３　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７３　

2008 Element

＊

CONTINUED

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 167.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 195

.Door and Tailgate Open Monitor . 63Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 80......................Power Door Locks . 80

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 251Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 159..Drive Gear Positions, D and D . 162

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 155

....................................Economy . 144........................Driving Guidelines . 156

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 210

..............................Economy, Fuel . 144............Emergencies on the Road . 221.............Battery, Jump Starting . 231...........Brake System Indicator . 237

................Changing a Flat Tire . 223.....Charging System Indicator . 235

..................Checking the Fuses . 238.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 73

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 235...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 236

..................Overheated Engine . 233...........................Emergency Brake . 93

......................Emergency Flashers . 73......................Emergency Towing . 243.......................Emissions Controls . 256........................Emissions Testing . 259

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68

......Engine Speed Limiter . 160, 163Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 60, 236.........................Oil Life Display . 185

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 235

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 193...............................Overheating . 233

............................Specifications . 248.......................................Starting . 158

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 256...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18

...................................Fan, Interior . 103.........................................Features . 101

.................First (1) Gear Position . 163....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 141

Filters.........................Dust and Pollen . 210

...............................................Oil . 194.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 73

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 223.....................................Floor Mats . 209

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 198

..........................................Brake . 200.........................................Clutch . 201

................................Differential . 200..............Manual Transmission . 199

..........................Power Steering . 201..................Windshield Washer . 197

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 111

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87..........................Four-way Flashers . 73

3

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：３８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７４　

2008 Element

＊＊

..........................Four-wheel Drive . 156............................Front Airbags . 11, 27

Front Seat......................................Adjusting . 13

...................................Airbags . 11, 27.................................................Fuel . 140

......................Fill Door and Cap . 141...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 140........................Reserve Indicator . 63

........................Tank, Filling the . 141.....................Fuses, Checking the . 238

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 202................................................Hatch . 81

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 73Headlights

........................................Aiming . 202.......Daytime Running Lights . 72

..................High Beam Indicator . 63........................Reminder Beeper . 71

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 202...................................Turning on . 71

..............................Head Restraints . 85......................Safety Information . 15

.....................Heating and Cooling . 102.............High Altitude, Starting at . 158

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 71..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 142

..............................................Horn . 5, 69...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 201

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 246Ignition

..............................................Keys . 75.............................................Light . 96...........................................Switch . 79

............Timing Control System . 257........................Immobilizer System . 76

.......Immobilizer System Indicator . 62...Important Handling Information . iv

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 60

...............................Infant Restraint . 42......................................Infant Seats . 42

......LATCH Anchorage System . 46...........................Lower Anchors . 46

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 212

...................................Inside Mirror . 92.............................Inspection, Tire . 214

............................Instrument Panel . 59........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60.................................Interior Lights . 96

........................................Introduction . i

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 144.........................................Gasoline . 140

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 140........................Tank, Filling the . 141

................Gas Station Procedures . 141.............................................Gauges . 66

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68...............................................Fuel . 67

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 161

..............Manual Transmission . 159........................................Glove Box . 98

Index

I

H

G

IV

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：４４　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７５　

2008 Element

CONTINUED

...............................Keys and Locks . 75

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 225.......................................Jack, Tire . 223

................................Jump Starting . 231

.......................Label, Certification . 246.................Lane Change, Signaling . 71

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21...........LATCH Anchorage System . 46

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 202

.......................................Indicator . 59.........................................Parking . 71

..................................Turn Signal . 71....................................Load Limits . 150

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 79Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 79....................................Glove Box . 98

............................................Hatch . 81

........................................Tailgate . 82........................Low Coolant Level . 143.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63

................................Lower Anchors . 46...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 159...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 249

.........................................Luggage . 149

..................................Maintenance . 183

.........................Minder Indicator . 61...Owner Maintenance Checks . 190

..........................................Safety . 184.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 60, 236

...................Manual Transmission . 159...............Checking Fluid Level . 199

.....Recommended Shift Points . 160................................Shifting the . 159

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 199

.................................Mirror, Vanity . 99..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 92

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 148Monitor, Door and Tailgate

.............................................Open . 63

...................Neutral Gear Position . 162..................New Vehicle Break-in . 140

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 160...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 246

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 140.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 66....................Off-Highway Driving . 179

Index

N

O

M

J

K

L

IND

EX

V

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：５１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７６　

Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 60, 235

Minder......................................... 185

Power Door .................................. 80

Low Tire Pressure Indicator....64, 169

.........................Meters, Gauges . 59, 66

2008 Element

＊

Oil........................Change, How to . 194......................Change, When to . 185......................Checking Engine . 143..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 235

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 193

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 79Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 256..............................Outside Mirrors . 92

....................Overheating, Engine . 233.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 190

..............Panel Brightness Control . 72........................Park Gear Position . 161

...........................................Parking . 165.................................Parking Brake . 93

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 60, 237

.................................Parking Lights . 71..Parking Over Things that Burn . 165

................................Playing a Disc . 119..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 107

Playing the XM Satellite..........................................Radio . 113

.............................PGM-FI System . 257..........................Power Door Locks . 80

.................................Power Mirrors . 92.................Power Socket Locations . 98

....................Power Steering Fluid . 201.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

........................Preparing to Drive . 157.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 37Protecting Infants and Small

.......................................Children . 42...........Protecting Larger Children . 51

.....................Using Booster Seat . 52

...................Radiator Overheating . 233.............Radio/CD Sound System . 107

..................RadioTheft Protection . 131................Readiness Codes, State . 259.................Rear Differential Fluid . 200

.......................................Rear Doors . 81

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 207..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 87

............................Rear View Mirror . 92.................................Rear Windows . 93

......................................Defogger . 73......................Wiper and Washer . 70

...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 83..............Reclining the Front Seats . 86

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 160...Recommended Tire Pressures . 213

.............................Reminder Lights . 59...............Removing the Rear Seats . 89

.......................Remote Transmitter . 77................Remote Audio Controls . 134

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 210

................Engine Oil and Filter . 194..........................................Fuses . 238

................................Light Bulbs . 202...........................................Tires . 212

.............................Wiper Blades . 210Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 23..........Reporting Safety Defects . 264

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 143, 196

Index

R

P

VI

０７／０４／２６　１９：１１：５６　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７７　

2008 Element

＊

＊

CONTINUED

...............................Restraint, Child . 37..................Reverse Gear Position . 162

......................................Roof Rack . 152................................Rotation, Tire . 215

................................Safety Belts . 10, 20.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 264

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55

..............................Safety Messages . iii................................Satellite Radio . 113

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 20...............Additional Information . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 22

.....................................Cleaning . 209................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 21

................................Maintenance . 22.....................Reminder Light . 20, 60

.............Replacing After a Crash . 23...................System Components . 20

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16.........................Seating Capacities . 248

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 83.............Second (2) Gear Position . 163

.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 44...............................Serial Number . 246

...........................Service Intervals . 191

...........................Service Manual . 265...........Service Station Procedure . 141

..........................Setting the Clock . 132.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 161

........................Shift Lock Release . 163....................................Side Airbags . 30

................................Off Indicator . 34Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 205...............................Signaling Turns . 71

............................................Skylight . 93.....................................Snow Tires . 216

................................Sound System . 107......................................Spare Tire . 222......................................Inflating . 222

............................Specifications . 250....................Specifications Charts . 248

................................Speed Control . 135

..........SRS, Additional Information . 24...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

.............................Airbag Service . 35How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 34How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 27

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32........................SRS Components . 24

.............................SRS Indicator . 33, 61....START (Ignition Key Position) . 79

.......................Starting the Engine . 158In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 158................With a Dead Battery . 231

........Steam Coming from Engine . 233Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 74.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 79

IndexIN

DE

X

S

VII

０７／０４／２６　１９：１２：０１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７８　

2008 Element

＊

＊

CONTINUED

...................Stereo Sound System . 107....................Storing Your Vehicle . 219

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 11, 24......................................Servicing . 35

.........................SRS Indicator . 33, 61...................System Components . 24

..................................Synthetic Oil . 194

Tailgate............................................Locks . 82

..............................Open Monitor . 63..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 207

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 221Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 251.....Emissions Control Systems . 256

....................Emissions Testing . 259Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 258.....................Tensioners, Seat Belt . 22

.......................Temperature Gauge . 68..............Tether Anchorage Points . 50

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................................(TPMS) . 169

.......................................Indicator . 65................Theft Protection, Radio . 131

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 258..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 74

..........................Time, Setting the . 132....................................Tire Chains . 217

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 223...........................Tire Information . 251

.................................Tire Labeling . 253...............................................Tires . 212

..............................Air Pressure . 213........................................Chains . 217

.........................Checking Wear . 214..........................Compact Spare . 222

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 251......................................Inflation . 212

..................................Inspection . 214.....Low Pressure Indicator . 64, 169

..............................Maintenance . 215...................................Replacing . 215

......................................Rotating . 215...........................................Snow . 216

............................Specifications . 250...................VSA and Tire Sizes . 172

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 223Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 173................................Emergency . 243

...Equipment And Accessories . 175.............................Weight Limit . 173

.....Trailer, Driving Safely With a . 177.............................Trailer Loading . 174...........................Traction Devices . 216

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 198Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 199..................Fluid Selection . 198, 199

..............Identification Number . 247.............Shifting the Automatic . 161

..................Shifting the Manual . 159......................Transmitter, Remote . 77

...................................Treadwear . 251.......................................Trip Meter . 66

....................................Turn Signals . 71

Index

T

VIII

０７／０４／２６　１９：１２：０５　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２７９　

2008 Element

＊

＊＊

.......................................XM Radio . 113

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 221

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 251........................Unleaded Gasoline . 140

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 195

..................................Vanity Mirror . 99.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 150

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 248....Vehicle Identification Number . 246

.............................Vehicle Storage . 219.....................................Ventilation . 104

.................................................VIN . 246..................................Viscosity, Oil . 193

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 171

.............................VSA Off Switch . 172VSA System and Activation

.....................................Indicators . 64

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55

..................Warranty Coverages . 263Washers, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 197.....................................Operation . 70

...........................................Wheels . 212...............Adjusting the Steering . 74............Alignment and Balance . 215

..............................Replacement . 215............................Specifications . 216

...............................Nut Wrench . 224Windows

..................Operating the Power . 91..............................................Rear . 93

...........................Rear, Defogger . 73Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 70...................................Defroster . 105

.....................................Washers . 197Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 210.....................................Operation . 70

....................................Worn Tires . 214

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 243

: U.S. only: Canada only

IndexIN

DE

X

U

V

W

X

IX

０７／０４／２６　１９：１２：１１　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２８０　

2008 Element

On 4WD model only

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:Power Steering Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

15.9 US gal (60 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

filter):

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity (including differential):2.0 US qt (1.9 ) Front:

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )Rear:

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

1.1 US qt (1.0 )Capacity:

Honda Dual Pump Fluid II. Do notuse ATF.4.4 US qt (4.2 )

SC model

All models except SC

193

199

201

200

０７／０４／２６　１９：１２：２８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０２８１　

Oil change capacity (including

(see page 198 ).

(AutomaticTransmission Fluid)Honda ATF-Z1

2008 Element

This owner’s manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of theElement. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SCVC50

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０７／０４／２６　１８：３５：４８　３１ＳＣＶ６５０　０００１　

2008 Element

07／04／26 18：35：53 31SCV650 0002...

Documents

Transcript of 07／04／26 18：35：53 31SCV650 0002...